Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – Circulation Plaza Renovation · 093000 – Tiling 095113 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings 096513 – Resilient Base and Accessories 096813 – Carpeting

Project Manual For:

Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – Circulation Plaza Renovation

1515 SW 10th AVE. Topeka, KS 66604

September 24, 2018

Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library – Circulation Plaza Renovation Project No. 217017

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

BIDDING DOCUMENTS

Invitation to Bid Instructions to Bidders Bid Form GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

AIA Document A201, 2007 (Included herein by reference) Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract Bonds DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 – Summary 012300 – Alternates

012500 – Substitution Procedures 012600 – Contract Modification Procedures 012900 – Payment Procedures 013100 – Project Management and Coordination 013300 – Submittal Procedures 014200 – References 015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 – Product Requirements 017300 – Execution 017419 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017700 – Closeout Procedures 017823 – Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 – Project Record Documents 017900 – Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 – Selective Structure Demolition

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITS

061053 – Misc. Rough Carpentry 064023 – Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

079200 – Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames


TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2

081416 – Wood Doors 087100 – Door Hardware

088000 – Glazing

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing 092900 – Gypsum Board 093000 – Tiling 095113 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings 096513 – Resilient Base and Accessories 096813 – Carpeting 099123 – Interior Painting 099300 – Staining and Transparent Finishing DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES (NOT USED)

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (BY OWNER)

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)

PLUMBING, MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING (Refer to Drawings)

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Refer to Drawings)

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL (Refer to Drawings)

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

INVITATION TO BID (Request for Proposal) September 24, 2018 PROJECT Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – Circulation Plaza Renovation PROJECT DESCRIPTION The Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library is a 21st-century, landmark library, named the Library Journal’s 2016 Library of the Year in the U.S. and Canada. The Library features the Alice C. Sabatini Gallery, the Millennium Café, Chandler Booktique (used bookstore), free public meeting rooms, computer training, and public Internet access. Located in the heart of Shawnee County, the Library has a collection of more than 450,000 items and serves nearly 100,000 registered borrowers. Approximately 3,000 people come through the doors daily. Bookmobiles make about 25 stops traveling across the county six days a week; and the Library provides services to 40 senior living facilities and 130 homebound individuals. The Digital Branch Library, www.tscpl.org, serves customers’ needs 24/7. In July, 2016, the Board of Trustees approved a Facilities Master Plan. The Plan is based on five guidelines:

1. Maintain optimal conditions and operation of the building, its site, systems, furnishings, technology, and other physical infrastructure.

2. Increase public space used to support learning, literacy, and civic engagement. 3. Preserve the Library’s architectural integrity and character. 4. Improve people’s ability to use the services, programs collections, and learning experiences provided by a

21st century library. 5. Exercise good stewardship of public and private resources in maintaining and improving the building, its

site, its systems, furnishings, technology, and other physical infrastructure. The Plan is expected to be completed in phases over a projected 10-year timeframe, subject to funding availability, and with individual projects approved by the Board of Trustees. The Plan may be viewed from the Library’s web site at https://tscpl.org/about then selecting the Facilities Master Plan hyperlink under Strategic Plans. The Phase 2 project within this Request for Proposal includes finalized plans for Design Concepts #2 and #4 in the Facilities Master Plan. This project encompasses several interior renovations designed to: (1) improve wayfinding and circulation within the Library and improve access to the Circulation Lobby; (2) create collaborative instructional/work space for large group use, supported by modern technology resources; and (3) modify the Large Print Collection Space to improve access & views, and improve adjacent support space. The project scope includes, but is not limited to:

a. Removal of existing small rooms adjacent to the Red Carpet Area. b. Construction of collaborative learning spaces for group use. c. Reconfiguration of space in the large print area with new openings to the corridor. d. Fabrication and installation of new glass doors at the entrances to the Learning Center. e. Construction of a new entry gate to the circulation lobby, and a display window to the Book Store. f. Renovation of the finishes including terrazzo tile flooring in the circulation lobby, main corridor, and

Rotunda entry.

https://tscpl.org/about

Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library p.2 Project: Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – the Circulation Plaza Renovation September 24, 2018

BID RECEIVING Date: Wednesday, October 10, 2018 Time: 2:00 PM CST Place: Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library 1515 SW 10th Avenue, Topeka, KS 66604 Menninger Room, 206 (2nd floor) Attendance at the bid receiving is not required. Those who do not attend shall ensure the bid is received by the Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library not later than 1:00 PM CST. TIMELINE OF BID PROCESS Invitation to Bid/RFP Issued: Monday, September 24, 2018

Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference/ Site Visit: Tuesday, October 2, 2018; 9:00 AM CST (meet in the Rotunda inside the Library’s front entrance)

Submission of Bidder Questions*: Thursday, October 4, 20188; prior to 2:00 PM CST

Bid Receiving: Wednesday, October 10, 2018; 2:00 PM CST

Board Consideration of Award: Thursday, October 18, 2018; 4:00 PM CST; (bidders do not need to be present at the Board Meeting)

Notification of Decision to Bidders: Friday, October 19, 2018 (via email)

Contract Awarded: Upon final legal approval *bidder questions must be submitted to the Project Coordinator in writing, preferably by email. OWNER Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library 1515 S.W. 10th Avenue Topeka, KS 66604-1374 Project Coordinator: Thad Hartman, Community & Strategic Services Manager P: 785-580-4511 E: [email protected]

Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library p.3 Project: Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – the Circulation Plaza Renovation September 24, 2018 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Date: September 24, 2018 PROJECT: Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – Circulation Plaza Renovation DEFINITIONS: Bidding documents include Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form, and Contract Documents, including any Addenda issued prior to bid receiving. ADDENDA: Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to bid receiving which modify or interpret the bidding documents, including specifications, additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections. Prior to bid receiving, Addenda will be posted on the Owner’s website and each Bidder recorded by the Owner as having received the bidding documents will be notified. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of Addenda on the Bid Form. Any questions or requests for information by interested bidders must be submitted in writing to the Project Coordinator, preferably by email, and will be posted on the Library’s webpage as a public document for anyone’s review. EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS: Each Bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an Addendum by the Owner. ONLY A WRITTEN INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION BY ADDENDUM SHALL BE BINDING. MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE/ SITE VISIT: Each Bidder intending to submit a bid as the Prime Contractor for the project must attend the pre-bid conference and site visit. The pre-bid conference and site visit will be held on Tuesday, October 2, 2018, 9:00 AM CST at the Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library. Bidders shall acknowledge attendance at pre-bid conference and site visit on the BID FORM. Bidders shall meet in the rotunda of the Library to begin the meeting. Subcontractors are also invited and encouraged to attend the pre-bid conference and site visit. This shall be the ONLY opportunity for bidding contractors and subcontractors to examine the site and existing facilities. Visits at other times will not be accommodated. Bids from those not attending this mandatory conference/site visit will not be accepted. BID PREPARATION A single lump sum bid will be received for a single General Contract for the completion of all work outlined in the Contract Documents. Additionally, there are three alternate items for which changes to the base bid are requested on the Bid Form. The Owner is a political subdivision of the State of Kansas, eligible for government contract prices, and is exempt for the Kansas Retailers' Sales Tax Act and Kansas Compensating Tax Act under the provisions of Kansas Statutes Annotated (K.S.A.) Supplement 79-3606(b). Bids shall be made upon the BID FORM included with these specifications. Fill in all blanks on the BID FORM clearly with typewriter or ink. Erasures or other changes in a bid must be explained or noted over the signature of the Bidder. Signature shall be in longhand by a principal duly authorized to sign contracts. Bids shall contain no alterations or recapitulation of the work. The Owner reserves the right to: (1) waive any informalities or minor defects in the bids or bidding procedures; (2) reject any or all bids; (3) rebid the project at a later date if bids are rejected; and (4) accept the bid that, in the judgment of the Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library, will be in the best interest of the Library, whether or not said bid is the lowest bid.

Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library p.4 Project: Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – the Circulation Plaza Renovation September 24, 2018 Bidders may not use omissions or errors in the Specifications or other Contract Documents to their advantage. The Owner reserves the right to issue new instructions correcting any such errors or omissions, which new instructions shall be treated as if originally included. The Owner may make any investigation it deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work. Bidders shall furnish information for this purpose to the Owner upon request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or other investigation of, the Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that the Bidder has the proper qualifications, experience, equipment, manpower, or financial and managerial capability to carry out the obligations of the contract agreement or to perform the work as specified. Bids shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. Mail, deliver or email the BID FORM to: Kim Torrey

Chief Financial Officer Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library 1515 SW 10th Avenue Topeka, KS 66604-1374 [email protected]

If submitting a paper BID FORM, enclose the BID FORM in a sealed opaque envelope bearing the legend:

BID FORM Project: Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library Facilities Mater Plan Phase 2 –Circulation Plaza Renovation Bidder: (your company name) Address: (your company address)

Please note email submission of BID FORMS is not secure, unless initiated in that manner by the Bidder. All documents in an emailed bid must be in read-only pdf format. COORDINATOR: The Coordinator shall assume general coordination and direction of the project. The

Coordinator is:

Thad Hartman Community & Strategic Services Manager

P: 785-580-4511 E: [email protected] BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION: The Bidder, by responding to this bid, represents that: 1. The Bidder has read and understood the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 2. The Bidder has carefully examined all bidding documents pertaining to the project. 3. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of Addenda, if any. 4. The Bidder acknowledges attendance at the pre-bid conference and site visit. BID RECEIVING: The Owner will receive and publicly open and read bid proposal forms at the time and place indicated in the INVITATION TO BID. The bid proposal shall include all costs for labor, materials, equipment, services and incidentals necessary to complete the work as represented in the Contract Documents. No oral or telephone bids will be considered. Modifications by telephone will be considered only on BID FORMS delivered to Owner prior to time set for bid receiving.

Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library p.5 Project: Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – the Circulation Plaza Renovation September 24, 2018 BID WITHDRAWAL: A Bidder may withdraw a BID FORM in writing, including via email, to Owner prior to time fixed for bid receiving. Unless otherwise provided in any supplement to these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, no Bidder shall modify, withdraw, or cancel the bid, or any part thereof, for thirty (30) calendar days after the date for receiving bids. EVALUATION CRITERIA: The Owner intends to accept the bid that, in the judgment of the Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library, will be in the best interest of the Library, whether or not said bid is the lowest bid. Criteria that shall be taken into consideration shall include, but not be limited to: the proposed cost, proposed time of completion, experience and competency of the contractor, demonstrated performance to complete similar work, capacity to complete work on time, and competency of proposed subcontractors to be utilized. AWARD OF CONTRACT: If notified of the acceptance of this bid within thirty (30) calendar days of the time set for opening of bids, the Bidder agrees to execute The Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner / Contractor where the Basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum, Document No. A-101, as issued by the American Institute of Architects, current edition, with Owner revisions, within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of such notification and in accordance with the bid and the Contract Documents. The Owner-Contractor Agreement shall be prepared by the Architect on behalf of the Owner. BONDS: PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL BONDS shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor, in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum as security for the faithful performance of the contract and payment of all persons performing labor and furnishing material in connection with the contract. Said payment bond shall also be executed in statutory bond and filed in the office of the Clerk of the District Court of the County in which the project is located (Shawnee). The successful Contractor shall provide the Owner with a certified copy of said statutory bond as so filed. BONDS FURNISHED shall be written by a SURETY approved by the U.S. Treasury Department and licensed to do business in the State of Kansas. No work shall be commenced until bonds are in force. FORM OF BOND shall be AIA Document A310, latest edition, issued and approved by the American Institute of Architects. POWER OF ATTORNEY for the surety company agent must accompany each bond issued, and must be certified to include the date of the bonds. Provide triplicate copies of the bond forms and power of attorney. Cost of the bonds shall be included in the bid and paid for by the Contractor. REJECTION OF BIDS: The Bidder acknowledges the Owner's right to reject any and all bids and to waive any formality or irregularity in any bid received. The Bidder recognizes the Owner's right to reject any bid, which fails to submit the data required by the bidding documents, or is in any way incomplete or irregular. An award to the lowest Bidder is not required. PROPOSED SCOPE OF WORK: Please refer to page 2 of this Request for Proposal for a brief summary of the proposed scope of work. The complete scope of work to be completed by the contractor is represented in the Contract Documents enumerated in the Sheet Index contained on Sheet G-1.0 and dated September 24, 2018. DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS: Drawing and Specifications will be issued digitally and may be obtained from the Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library web site at https://tscpl.org/about/request-for-proposals

https://tscpl.org/about/request-for-proposals

Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library p.6 Project: Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – the Circulation Plaza Renovation September 24, 2018

BID FORM--Single Contract Owner: Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library

1515 S.W. 10th Avenue Topeka, KS 66604-1374

BASE BID In compliance with the Invitation for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, and Contract Documents, the Undersigned proposes to provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and incidentals necessary for COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION of the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents at the prices stated below. The Undersigned agrees to perform all Work indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specifications and Addenda thereto for the complete construction for the total sum of: _______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________dollars ($_______________). ALTERNATE PRICES For changes to the scope of work as described in the Schedule of Alternates, Division 1, the Undersigned agrees to modify the Base Bid as itemized below: Alternate No. Brief Description Add Deduct 01 Add removal of existing stone tile flooring in Vestibule $_________ N/A 100A, Rotunda 100B, and Lobby 100C and installation of terrazzo tile flooring. 02 Add removal of existing stone tile flooring in Foyer 109, $_________ N/A Atrium 160, and Foyer 163 and installation of terrazzo tile flooring 03 Add painting of Lobby 100, Corridors 122A-D and $_________ N/A Corridors 134B-D. 04 If required by Addendum $_________ $_________ 05 If required by Addendum $_________ $_________ ADDENDA Receipt is acknowledged of Addenda numbers ________________. PRE-BID CONFERENCE/SITE VISIT: A representative was in attendance. YES NO _____ TIME OF COMPLETION The undersigned agrees to substantially complete the work of the Contract within _______ calendar days from the date of the award of Contract. It is the Owner's desire that the project be completed as expeditiously as prudent for proper execution of the work. Time of completion may be a factor in consideration for award of contract. CONTRACT If notified of the acceptance of this bid within thirty (30) calendar days of the time set for opening of bids, Undersigned agrees to execute The Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner / Contractor where the Basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum, Document No. A-101, as issued by the American Institute of Architects, current edition, with Owner revisions, within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of such notification and in accordance with the bid and the Contract Documents.

Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library p.7 Project: Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – the Circulation Plaza Renovation September 24, 2018 BONDS The Undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to execute and deliver to the Architect at time of Contract Signing a Performance Bond and Labor and Materials Payment Bond in amounts equal to 100% of the Contract Sum as set forth in the Instructions to Bidders. DECLARATION The undersigned hereby declares the Bidding Documents have been carefully examined, this proposal is submitted in compliance therewith, and that in signing this bid he waives all rights to plead any misunderstanding regarding same. The undersigned understands that competence and responsibility, time of completion, as well as any other factors of interest to the Owner may be a consideration in making the award. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to accept or reject alternate proposals and unit prices, and waive technicalities concerning the bid proposals received as it may be in the Owner's best interest to do so. ______________________________________ _______________________ Authorized Representative's Signature Date ______________________________________ _______________________ Title Telephone ______________________________________ _______________________ Company Fax ______________________________________ _______________________ Street Address E-Mail ______________________________________ City/State/Zip


SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT - 1

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

The following supplements modify AIA Document A201-2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1.4 The Project

The drawings and specifications presented at this time and described as Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – Circulation Plaza Renovations, constitute a part of the total work of the project. Additional work includes but is not limited to separate contract entered into by the Owner, signage by separate contract entered into by the Owner, equipment by separate contract entered into by the Owner, moving and furniture installation by separate contract entered into by the Owner.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER

2.2 Information and Services Required by the Owner

Delete Section 2.2.5 and substitute the following:

2.2.5 The Owner shall furnish the Contractor one (1) .pdf file of the drawings and specifications. The Contractor may reproduce, at the Contractor’s expense, as many copies of the documents as are required to execute the work of this phase of the Project.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR

3.4 Labor and Materials

Add Section 3.4.2.1 to Section 3.4.2:

3.4.2.2 The Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for reviewing the Contractor’s proposed substitutions and making agreed-upon changes in the Drawings and Specifications resulting from such substitutions.

3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

Add Section 3.12.11 to Section 3.12:

3.12.11 The Architect’s review of Contractor’s submittals will be limited to examination of an initial submittal and two (2) resubmittals. The Owner is entitled to obtain reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of additional resubmittals.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.3 Applications for Payment

Add the following Section 9.3.1.3 to Section 9.3.1:



9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion the Owner shall pay 90% of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments.

9.8 Substantial Completion

Add the following Section 9.8.3.1 to Section 9.8.3:

9.8.3.1 The Architect will perform no more than two (2) inspections to determine whether the Work or a designated portion thereof has attained Substantial Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect fir any additional inspections.

9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment

Add the following section 9.10.1.1 to Section 9.10.1:

9.10.1.1 The Architect will perform no more than two (2) inspections to determine whether the Work or a designated portion thereof has attained Final Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner is entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for any additional inspections.

ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS

Add Paragraph 11.1.4:

The following insurance protection, underwritten by carriers approved by the Owner, shall be certified to for the required limits of liability. No work shall commence prior to obtaining all insurance hereunder and filing certificates with the Architect.

1. Contractor’s Liability Insurance: Contractor shall provide evidence of his insurance, including workman’s compensation and employer’s liability as required by the State of Kansas and comprehensive general liability and comprehensive automobile liability. Coverage under comprehensive general liability insurance shall be on an Occurrence Basis for X, C and U Hazards (where applicable). Personal Injury Liability (Groups A, B and C) on an Occurrence Basis for Property Damage and shall include non-owned and hired automobiles. Coverage shall be in the following minimum amounts: (Noted as per occurrence / Aggregate Limits):

Workers Compensation a. $1,000,000 Each Accident Limit b. $1,000,000 Each Employee Limit c. $1,000,000 Policy Limit Commercial General Liability a. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence Limit b. $2,000,000 General Aggregate Limit c. $2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate Limit d. $1,000,000 Personal & Advertising Injury Limit Contractor’s Commercial General Liability policy must name Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library as an additional insured; the policy must also include a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library.



Automobile Liability a. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage

Coverage must be included for hired and non-owned autos.

2. Contractor shall provide Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library prior to commencement of

work, a Certificate of Insurance providing evidence that required coverages are in force and will not be cancelled without at least 30 days’ notice to Topeka and Shawnee County Public Library. Contractor and Subcontractors shall evidence required insurance coverage on the Certificate of Insurance (A.I.A. Document G705), or other certificate approved as to form by Owner.


BONDS - 1

BONDS

1. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL BONDS:

A. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL BONDS shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor, in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum as security for the faithful performance of the contract and payment of all persons performing labor and furnishing material in connection with the contract. Said payment bond shall also be executed in statutory bond and filed in the office of the Clerk of the District Court of the County in which the project is located (Shawnee). The successful Contractor shall provide the Owner with a certified copy of said statutory bond as so filed.

B. BONDS FURNISHED shall be written by a SURETY approved by the U.S. Treasury Department and licensed to do business in the State of Kansas. No work shall be commenced until bonds are in force.

C. FORM OF BOND shall be AIA Document A310, latest edition, issued and approved by the American Institute of Architects.

D. POWER OF ATTORNEY for the surety company agent must accompany each bond issued, and must be certified to include the date of the bonds.

E. PROVIDE TRIPLICATE COPIES of the bond forms and power of attorney.

F. COST of the bonds shall be included in the bid and paid for by the Contractor.


SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Construction. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library, Facilities Master Plan Phase 2 – Circulation Plaza Renovations

1. Project Location: 1515 SW 10th Ave., Topeka, Kansas 66604.

B. Owner: Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library.

1. Owner's Representative: Thad Hartman – Community & Strategic Services Manager, Mailing Address: Topeka Shawnee County Public Library, 1515 SW 10th Ave, Topeka, Kansas 66604 Telephone: 785-580-4511, Email: [email protected]

C. Architect: Tevis Architectural Group P.A., David Heit, AIA, Mailing Address: 1250 SW Oakley Avenue, Topeka, Kansas 66604, Mobile Telephone: 785-220-8231, Office Telephone: 785-234-6664, Email: [email protected] .

Consultants:

1. Mechanical & Electrical Engineering: PKMR Engineers, Scott McKinley PE, Mailing Address: 2933 SW Woodside Drive, Topeka, Kansas 66614, Office Telephone: 785-273-2447, Email: [email protected] .

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of this contract shall be that as described as the Project, which is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1. The work includes partial remodeling of Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library, 1515 SW 10th Ave., Topeka, Kansas including, but not limited to: a. Selective demolition. b. Cabinetry and millwork c. Doors and hardware. d. Wood framed storefront and glazing e. Gypsum board walls and partitions. f. Acoustic panel ceilings and grid. g. Carpeting and tile flooring. h. Painting. i. Plumbing (see plumbing documents). j. Heating and Air Conditioning work (see mechanical documents). k. Electrical power and lighting (see electrical documents).

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

a. AIA Document A101-2007, Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION

A. General: It is the intention of the Owner to remodel a portion of the Topeka & Shawnee County Public Library located at 1515 SW 10th Ave., Topeka, Kansas, in a short and cost effective manner, schedule to be determined by the Contractor and submitted with bid.

B. Construction: The remodeling shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Selective Demolition: a. Remove indicated non-load-bearing interior partitions b. Remove indicate interior finishes, ceiling, flooring, wall covering, and millwork. c. Remove HVAC grilles, plumbing, and light fixtures as indicated.

2. Renovation: a. Renovate Circulation Lobby to be multi-functional Circulation Plaza including self-checkout and

display of express collections b. Renovate former Magazine Room into new Learning Center c. Provide glazed entrance to Learning Center from Circulation Plaza d. Renovate Red Carpet services area and reconfigure large print collection e. As an alternate bid, replace stone tile flooring with terrazzo tile flooring in Vestibule 100A, Rotunda

100B, and Lobby 100C f. As an alternate bid, replace stone tile flooring with terrazzo tile flooring in Foyer 109, Atrium 160, and

Foyer 163

1.6 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

B. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.

1. The Owner plans to remove all stored materials, furniture and equipment of value to the Owner from the work area.

C. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract.


SUMMARY 011000 - 3

1. Installation of furniture, equipment, and security & communications equipment.

1.7 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available

to Owner use and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment

on-site. c. Contractor parking will be available at 1001 SW Garfield just west of the Library, coordinate with

Owner.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.9 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1.10 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

2. Maintain dust partitions, to limit access to work areas.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. The Library opens at 9am, construction & demolition with excessive noise, should be scheduled before 9am.

1. Additional working hours may be negotiated with the Owner.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner five days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.


SUMMARY 011000 - 4

2. Obtain Architect’s and Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

1.11 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section

numbers found in this Project Manual.

D. Document Relationship: The Contract Documents are intended to be complementary, and only as a whole fully represent the scope of the Project.

1. Materials and/or work required by one drawing are intended to be as binding as if represented by all. 2. Where conflict shall arise between one drawing to another, or between drawings and specifications, then

that quantity, methodology, and/or standard that shall produce the higher cost result shall be assumed unless clarified by written Addendum.

3. The organization of drawings into various disciplines does not imply a division of the work; work that may reasonably be the responsibility of one subcontractor may be represented in another portion of the drawings. The Documents shall be reviewed as a whole.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1

SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.

1.7 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include freight and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance No. 1: Lump-Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $9,000.00 for carpet tile for the Red Carpet area and accessory spaces to be selected by Architect and as specified in Section 096813 "Tile Carpeting."

B. Allowance No. 2: Lump-Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $5,000.00 for LVT for the Learning Center and accessory spaces to be selected by Architect and as specified in Section 096519 "Resilient Tile Flooring."



ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to

incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


ALTERNATES 012300 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: New Flooring at Entry Lobby

1. Base Bid: Existing flooring to remain as-is. 2. Alternate: Remove existing stone tile flooring, setting bed, and any related accessories in

Vestibule 100A, Rotunda 100B, and Lobby 100C. Clean and prep concrete slab as required to accept new flooring. Install terrazzo tile flooring. Reference Finish Plan and Room Finish Schedule in Drawings. Reference Specification Section 093000 for tile requirements.

B. Alternate No. 2: New Flooring at Atrium and Foyers

1. Base Bid: Existing corridors to remain as-is. 2. Alternate: Remove existing stone tile flooring, setting bed, and any related accessories in Foyer

109, Atrium 160, and Foyer 163. Clean and prep concrete slab as required to accept new flooring. Install terrazzo tile flooring. Reference Finish Plan and Room Finish Schedule in Drawings. Reference Specification Section 093000 for tile requirements.

C. Alternate No. 3: Painting at Corridors

1. Base Bid: Existing corridors and Lobby to remain as-is. 2. Alternate: Add painting of walls and base at Lobby 100C, Corridors 122A-D, and Corridors 134B-

D, as shown in the Finish Schedule.



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product

submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.


A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as

applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,



sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-

ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.



1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days of the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,

including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices. 2. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling

changes to the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect.



c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

5. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

6. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.



3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every

entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the

Work.



9. Initial progress report. 10. Report of preconstruction conference. 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and payment bonds, if required. 13. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,

fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-

engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.


A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.



1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:



1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.



5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect,

and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Lines of communications. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of record documents. l. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Parking availability.



u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. First aid. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility requirements. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's written instructions. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. s. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Installation procedures. u. Coordination with other work. v. Required performance results. w. Protection of adjacent work. x. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.



1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority, Architect,

and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection

for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final

payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. k. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. l. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at bi-weekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority and

Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization.



8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.





SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the

schedule of values. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance

manuals. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and



delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's

construction schedule. 2. Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction

schedule. 3. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and

related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial

submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section

as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing

will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with

other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or

other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be

transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

C. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's

review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date.



c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

j. Architects project number. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of

copies to Architect. 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for

transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following

information: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Architect’s project number. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal. 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.



4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect and Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Architect’s project number. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of

multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Action Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy.



3. Informational Submittals: Submit one paper copy of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and

certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where

indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not

suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Two paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one

copy.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following

information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy.



D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one

submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification

Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are

the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of

units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,

texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set;

one will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least two sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

F. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

G. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

H. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

I. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.



J. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

K. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

L. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

M. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

N. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.



B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.



REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.



B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies

directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org

ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org

ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 www.concrete.org

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org

AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)



AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955

www.aham.org

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org

APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org

APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems

(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

(800) 527-4723

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org

AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) 534-8300 www.awci.org

AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA)



AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636

www.awinet.org

AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077 (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com

BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association

International)

www.bifma.com

CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880 www.carpetcushion.org

CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 www.ce.org (703) 907-7600

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org

CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300

DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org

EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org

ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org



FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300

www.fmglobal.com

FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com

FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global)

FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com

FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org

GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com

GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org

HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700 www.pumps.org

HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org

HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM)

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org

IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International)

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org



IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561

www.iest.org

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org

ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150

ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO)

ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org

LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org

MH Material Handling (Now MHIA)

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190

MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

(703) 281-6613

www.mss-hq.com

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591 www.naamm.org

NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200



www.nace.org

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org

NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-2300 www.ncta.com

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org

NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org

NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400

NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA)

PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720

RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580



www.rfci.com

SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424

SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers

(See ASCE)

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org

SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA)

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (Now TCNA)

TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance

(703) 907-7700

www.tiaonline.org

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747 www.usgbc.org



WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.wcmanet.org

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers

Association) (212) 297-2109

www.windowcoverings.org

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door

Association) (847) 299-5200

www.wdma.com

WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)

(916) 372-9943

www.wicnet.org

WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI)

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

PRIVATE tbl2 IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100

www.iapmo.org

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.



PRIVATE tbl3 CE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011

www.usace.army.mil

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923

DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov

DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov

FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov

GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov

LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov

NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999

PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA)

PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs

RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA)

SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov

TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://gulliver.trb.org



USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov

USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

PRIVATE tbl4 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800

www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)

FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS)

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925

www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800

www.wbdg.org/ccb

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard



(See FS)

MIL (See MILSPEC)

MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253

Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080

www.access-board.gov

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

PRIVATE tbl5 CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings

and Thermal Insulation (800) 952-5210

www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-2041

CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6815

www.calregs.com

CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782

www.cpuc.ca.gov

TFS Texas Forest Service (979) 458-6650

Forest Resource Development http://txforestservice.tamu.edu





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.



1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.



C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped

vacuum equipment.

G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

H. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.



a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use of the Owner’s parking is allowed, provided as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of

fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project

site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.



3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 3. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and

weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.



1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish

salient characteristics of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:



a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.



4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Installation of the Work. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural

elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.



3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and

ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.



1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core

drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.

Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.



3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

B. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work

area, as appropriate.

C. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended.



If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

D. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

F. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial

demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including but not limited to the following: 1. Demolition Waste:

a. Doors and frames. b. Door hardware. c. Metal studs. d. Gypsum board.



e. Plumbing fixtures. f. Piping. g. Supports and hangers. h. Copper wiring.

2. Construction Waste: a. Lumber. b. Wood sheet materials. c. Metals. d. Insulation. e. Carpet. f. Gypsum board. g. Piping. h. Electrical conduit. i. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above,

salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed

from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.



4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

B. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

C. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry

location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.

For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of to

accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and

areas.

B. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section “Execution” for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel. 5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the

Work in those Sections.


A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.



1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

A. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

B. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel

of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment,

and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements. 8. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.



1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion

inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.



C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, in areas disturbed by construction activities, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces.

f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.



g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove

excess lubrication, paint, and other foreign substances. k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting

from water exposure. l. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of

diffusers, registers, and grills. m. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or

that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Product maintenance manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:



1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Two paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return one copies.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect[ will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."



2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems

contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment



included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.



D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.



C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.



1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project

Record Documents."

F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the

Work in those Sections.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit one paper-copy set of marked-up record prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information

recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files and two set(s) of record digital data file plots. 2) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.



C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic file of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic file of each submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Locations and depths of underground utilities. d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. e. Revisions to electrical circuitry. f. Actual equipment locations. g. Duct size and routing. h. Locations of concealed internal utilities. i. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. j. Changes made following Architect's written orders. k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. m. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.



B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings.

2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in

recording information.

a. See Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that

correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.



3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in

those Sections.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video

recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors'

personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.



3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures

to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:



a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media. 1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic

label. 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents.

Provide complete screen-based menu. 3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as

identified in Project specifications. 4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the

Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents: a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address.



c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. E-mail address.

B. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. 1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of

contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and

pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

C. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording. 1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

D. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while or dubbing audio narration off-site after video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

E. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

F. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.



SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy

requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.



4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for

each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's

partial occupancy of completed Work.

D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition.

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

G. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect

and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.



D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs

of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or

duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01

Section "Summary."



B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Building manager will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by

Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary

services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or

compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary

Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to

and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing

construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified

in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.



3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective

demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly

dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall

and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 3. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials

and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition[ and cleaned] and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.



3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and

areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey

debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management

and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035416 - 1

SECTION 035416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certifying that products are compatible.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1.8 COORDINATION



A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. b. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Chemrex Self-Leveling Underlayment. c. MAPEI Corporation; Ultraplan 1 Plus. d. US SPEC, Division of US Mix Products Company; US SPEC Self-Leveling Underlayment.

2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219.

3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.

B. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).

C. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from

telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.



1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended

in writing by manufacturer. 2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat

adhesion. 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through

underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking and nailers, etc. 3. Wood furring. 4. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture

content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic

or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that

do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or

concrete.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.



5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA,

WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 5. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.



H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy

Group 1 or 2.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

G. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.



3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate work surfaces. 2. Wood millwork. 3. Quartz countertops

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and

hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, indicated including but not limited to high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items installed in

architectural woodwork.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

E. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

F. Qualification Data: For fabricator.




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels indicating that woodwork complies with

requirements of grades specified.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,

establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:



1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea

formaldehyde. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with

exposed or semiexposed edges.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-

pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Abet Laminati, Inc. b. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc. c. Formica Corporation. d. Lamin-Art, Inc. e. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. f. Panolam Industries International Incorporated. g. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. h. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

E. Quartz Surfacing Material: 1. Availible Manufacturer: Cambria or Equal

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

A. Hinges: Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing.

B. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long and 5/16 inch in diameter.

C. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing

slides.

E. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121 – Standard cam type; at locations indicated.

F. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041 – Standard cam type; at locations indicated.

G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

H. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.




A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the

following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. b. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

2. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 3. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.5 CABINETS

A. Grade: Custom.

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: Wood Veneer match existing.

D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

E. Edge Treatment:



1. Cabinet Edges: PVC edge banding, 1 mm thick, matching laminate in color, pattern and finish. 2. Door and Drawer Edges: match existing, pattern and finish.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories:

a. Solid colors, gloss and matte finish. b. Wood grains, gloss and matte finish, vertical grain direction. c. Patterns, gloss and matte finish.

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Custom.

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2. Match Architect's sample. 3. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories:

a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Wood grains, matte finish. c. Patterns, matte finish.

D. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.

E. Edge Treatment: match existing maple wood edge, pattern and finish.

F. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard.

G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

H. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.

2.7 Quartz Solid Surface and Countertops

A. Material Thickness: 1cm, 2cm or 3cm per available color, or installation requirements.

B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.



B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight

line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches

o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes [to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive.

4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Acoustical joint sealants.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. 2. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 3. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

G. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

I. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:



1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

J. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

K. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant

manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications

indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or

construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.



4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be

continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5307&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456801339&mf=04&src=wd









b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.










PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint

sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not

stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.



1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in

ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces- JS-2. 1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and

partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and

elevator entrances. e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces – JS-3. 1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, mildew resistant, acid curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces- JS-4. 1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow metal frames. 2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and

finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.



C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Custom Metal Products. 6. DKS Steel Door & Frame Sys. Inc. 7. Gensteel Doors Inc. 8. Greensteel Industries, Ltd. 9. J/R Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc. 10. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 11. L.I.F. Industries, Inc. 12. Mesker Door Inc. 13. Michbi Doors Inc. 14. MPI Group, LLC (The). 15. National Custom Hollow Metal. 16. North American Door Corp. 17. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 18. Republic Doors and Frames. 19. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 20. Titan Metal Products, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
























2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Standard-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1.. 1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4. 2. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch

thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."



J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,

fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor;

however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame.

Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or

fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal-stud partitions. .

C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of

hollow-metal work for hardware.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying

with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.



2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors

are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field

splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly

set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to

comply with installation tolerances. .

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.



a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to

manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and

plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from

jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to

plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel

lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 1

SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Interior, wood door and sidelite frames. 3. Finishing stile and rail wood doors. 4. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware. 5. Prehanging doors in frames.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for requirements for veneers from the same flitches for both architectural woodwork and stile and rail wood doors.

2. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for field finishing stile and rail doors.



1. Include details of construction and glazing. 2. Include factory finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data, including the following:

1. Dimensions of doors for factory fitting. 2. Locations and dimensions of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Requirements for veneer matching. 4. Doors to be factory finished, and finish requirements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.

D. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from manufacturer.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors from single manufacturer.

C. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of quality standard referenced in Part 2.

B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.

1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion:

a. Interior Doors: Life of original installation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified.

1. Assemble interior doors, frames, and sidelites, including components, with either dry-use or wet-

use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints.



B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins.

C. Panel Products: 1. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde

resin, complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

2.2 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors Custom interior doors complying with WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Stile and Rail Wood Doors by Maiman (to match the existing Maiman Doors); or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Eggers Industries. c. Maiman Company (The).

3. Panel Designs: Indicated by Drawings. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

4. Grade: Custom. 5. Finish: Transparent 6. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: plain sawed/sliced White Maple. 7. Door Construction for Transparent Finish:

a. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber; may be edge glued for width. Select lumber for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces.

b. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber or veneered, edge- and end-glued clear lumber. Select veneers for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. Use veneers not less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

c. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered, wood-based panel product.

8. Door Construction for Opaque Finish:

a. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear softwood; may be edge glued for width and finger jointed.

b. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber or veneered edge- and end-glued lumber.

c. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered, Medium-density fiberboard.

9. Stile and Rail Widths:

a. Intermediate Rails: 3inches. b. Bottom, Top, and Stiles Rails: 8 ½ inches.

10. Flat-Panel Thickness: 5/8 inch. 11. Molding Profile (Sticking) Recessed square







12. Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick, complying with Section 088000 "Glazing."

13. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6A and grade specified.

2.3 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION

A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting.

B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated:

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only

to extent permitted by labeling agency.

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W Series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

D. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.

E. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Section 088000 "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.

F. Prehung Doors: Provide stile and rail doors as prehung units including doors, frames, and hardware.

1. Provide wood door frames that comply with Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork." 2. Provide hardware that complies with Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.4 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing." Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish.



2.5 FINISHING

A. Finish wood doors at factory or woodworking shop where indicated in schedules or on Drawings. Wood doors that are not indicated to be factory or shop finished may be field finished.

B. For doors indicated to be factory or shop finished, comply with WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.

1. Finish faces and all four edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: Match existing doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood stile and rail door] will be installed.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth.

B. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

C. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors," and other requirements specified.

D. Field-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering.

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.

E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.



F. Factory or Shop -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and Smoke

Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors. 8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.



B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and

in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

D. Informational Submittals:

1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.



B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 4. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.



C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for

every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

2. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings:

a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Stanley Hardware (ST).

2.3 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.



B. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and

be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Restricted Keyway.

C. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.

2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.

3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing Falcon system.

D. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

E. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.

F. Key Registration List (Bitting List):

1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software.

2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series.

2.5 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.



2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum

framing.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2.6 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers

on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt and security type fasteners as required for proper installation.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. c. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 9500 Series. d. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 281 Series.



2.7 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:

a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.

4. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.


a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.8 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.


a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.9 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products (NG).



2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.11 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical door hardware.

Hardware Schedule ( by Addendum)

General Note: All hardware to match existing building hardware type and finishes, contractor to verify.

.



GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Wood Framed Windows.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants and spacers, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets.


GLAZING 088000 - 2

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass, coated float glass, and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for

Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-


GLAZING 088000 - 3

treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to

bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM, silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense

compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other

materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 890. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.


GLAZING 088000 - 4

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.8 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at

corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as recommended by manufacturer and fabricator.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install

correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes


GLAZING 088000 - 6

are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.


GLAZING 088000 - 7

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise

indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.



C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to

interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track or Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track or Vertical Slip Track II.

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.

G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch.

I. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

J. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel

thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or

double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=226&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456814680&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd











K. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire

hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor or Postinstalled, expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide

flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.015 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.

5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and

other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration

without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of

time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing

installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce

joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.



2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance

from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for

door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Z-Furring Members: 1. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with

concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum

that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal

forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that

interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards.



3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for Acoustical Joint Sealants to be installed as part of sound

rated gypsum board walls and partitions. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension

systems that support gypsum board panels.




A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed

Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.



1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:












a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim

flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to

0.112 inch thick.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,

coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and

decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent

possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.



2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of

panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or

required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints.

Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically

(parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings or according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges and where indicated.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Where indicated on Drawings. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,

sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface

contamination and discoloration.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 10 units of each type installed.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test

specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

D. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS AC1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG Corp.; Mars ClimaPlus:

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

C. Color: White.

D. LR: Not less than 0.90

E. NRC: Not less than .65-75.

F. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

G. Thickness: 3/4 inches.




H. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for

attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion or Postinstalled bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M,

Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

D. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish:

a. For AC1: Painted white.



2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Fry Reglet Corporation. 5. Gordon, Inc. 6. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and

suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum

that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by

bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that

interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system



members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers

unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance

limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3

inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of

suspension-system runners and moldings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.



B. Samples for Review and Selection: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient base and stair accessories shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AB; American Biltrite. 2. Allstate Rubber Corp. 3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 4. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 5. Flexco. 6. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 7. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 8. Nora Systems, Inc. 9. Roppe Corporation, USA. 10. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring and carpet.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 3. Flexco. 4. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 5. Musson Rubber Company. 6. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Description: Vinyl joiner for tile and carpet and carpet and resinous flooring.





















C. Profile and Dimensions: Provide #177 joiner by Roppe Corporation or equal by other manufacturers as listed above.

D. Locations: Provide at transitions between tile and carpet, and carpet and resinous flooring.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less except that adhesive for rubber stair treads

shall have a VOC content of 60 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other

Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into

spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.



3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less

than 6 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Luxury Vinyl (solid vinyl) floor tile.



B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern

of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile

manufacturer for installation techniques required.




A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I.

2.2 LUXURY VINYL (Solid Vinyl) FLOOR TILE

A. Products: As selected by Owner and Architect under Allowance as defined in Section 012100 – ALLOWANCES.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

a. Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other

Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into

spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.



C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop and buff surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING 096613 - 1

SECTION 096613 - PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Precast terrazzo units. 2. Precast terrazzo accessories.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with terrazzo.



1. Review methods and procedures related to terrazzo including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

b. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

c. Review special terrazzo designs and patterns.



B. Shop Drawings: Include terrazzo installation requirements. Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other work. Show layout of the following:

1. Divider strips. 2. Control-joint strips. 3. Expansion-joint strips. 4. Accessory strips. 5. Precast terrazzo jointing and edge configurations. 6. Terrazzo patterns.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type, material, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory required showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Label each



terrazzo sample to identify manufacturer's matrix color and aggregate types, sizes, and proportions. Prepare Samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the Work, in size indicated below: 1. Precast Terrazzo: 12-inch square Samples. 2. Accessories: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each exposed strip item required.



B. Material Certificates: For each type of terrazzo material or product, from manufacturer.


A. Maintenance Data: For terrazzo to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Setting and Grouting Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of grout and setting materials.

B. TCNA Standards: Comply with specifications under the current Handbook for Tile Installation


A. Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any.

B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.


A. Environmental Limitations: Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by the setting materials manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with precast terrazzo by field measurements before fabrication.

C. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during terrazzo installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic during terrazzo application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRECAST TERRAZZO

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Tectura Designs as indicated on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Precast Terrazzo Enterprises, Inc. 2. Romoco Precast Terrazzo Products.

B. Precast Terrazzo Units (T-1, T-2, and T-3): 23-13/16” x 23-13/16” x 5/8” thick, 32.0 lbs, pressed cement terrazzo units.

1. Tile T-1: Tectura Tile T265 Essence. 2. Tile T-2: Tectura Custom Tile same as T265 Essence with gray matrix 3. Tile T-3: Tectura Tile T241 Swiss Alps, with radius cut at Rotunda.

C. Precast Epoxy Terrazzo Accessories: precast epoxy-resin terrazzo transition strips transitioning from 5/8” thick to ¼” thick, length and width as indicated on drawings, colors as indicated on drawings to match precast tile units above.

2.2 STRIP MATERIALS

A. Standard Divider Strips: One-piece, flat-type strips for grouting into sawed joints prepared in substrate.

1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Width: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

B. Control-Joint Strips: Separate, double L-type angles, positioned back to back, that match material and color of divider strips and in depth required for topping thickness indicated.

C. Expansion-Joint Strips: Stainless steel, with removable zip-strip top for installing sealant; minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide.

D. Accessory Strips: Match divider-strip width, material, and color unless otherwise indicated. Use the following types of accessory strips as required to provide a complete installation: 1. Edge-bead strips for exposed edges of terrazzo.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. The maximum allowable substrate variation can be no more the 1/8" in 10' and 1/16" in

24"

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including levelness tolerances, have been corrected.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=515&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456895327&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456895328&mf=&src=wd



3.2 PRECAST TERRAZZO INSTALLATION A. Comply with the appropriate Installation method as depicted in the current edition of the

Tile Council of North America Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Installation. B. All Materials used for installation of Cement Terrazzo Tile must comply with the appropri-

ate ANSI 118 and/or ISO 13007 standards and specifications. Setting materials manufac-turer’s printed installation instructions are to be followed in every instance. The use of a Rapid Setting ANSI A-118.4 and ISO C2S1 mortar or better is required.

1. A minimum of 95 percent thin-set coverage is recommended on the back of the

terrazzo tile. The corners of the tile must have good mortar support to prevent cracking. Back buttering is required on tiles larger than 12” to reach these requirements.

C. Appropriate ANSI A-108 installation specifications that correspond with the selected TCNA Installation Method are required. This includes Substrate and Surfaces inspec-tions, Location and Frequency of EJ171 Movement Joint Guidelines, Placement Tech-niques, and Grouting Procedures. 1. Minimum recommended grout joint width is 1/8”

D. Seal joints between units with cement grout matching precast terrazzo matrix.


A. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure that terrazzo is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular, print, cut pile carpet tile.


1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories

installed with carpet tile.



1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction.



8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long

Samples.



B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to ten (10) percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association.


A. Comply with CRI 104.


A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.



B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, [dimensional stability,] [excess static discharge,] [loss of tuft bind strength,] loss of face fiber, <Insert failure characteristic> and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE

A. Products: As selected by Owner and Architect under Allowance as defined in Section 012100 – ALLOWANCES.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with anodized finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.



D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern as directed by Architect.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel and galvanized steel. 2. Gypsum board and plaster. 3. Wood trim.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.


A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.



1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Diamond Vogel Paints. 3. Porter Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.

B. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

C. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

2.5 LATEX PAINTS

A. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3).



B. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items

that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,

performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to

produce paint systems indicated.

D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.



B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.1R.

a. Prime Coat: Door frame units are factory primed. Touch up as required with rust inhibitive primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (semigloss).

B. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim and architectural woodwork. 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #141.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates - Typical: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex (eggshell).



STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1

SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates:

a. Exposed wood doors and panel products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches square or 8

inches long. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2,

with the product proposed for use highlighted. 3. VOC content.




A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color

applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type

of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Canada). 4. Bennette Paint Mfg. Co., Inc. 5. Cloverdale Paint. 6. Coronado Paint.










7. Davis Paint Company. 8. Diamond Vogel Paints. 9. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 10. Durant Paints Inc. 11. Duron, Inc. 12. Euclid Chemical Company. 13. ICI Paints. 14. Kelly-Moore Paints. 15. Kwal Paint. 16. Miller Paint. 17. Mills Paint. 18. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 19. Pratt & Lambert. 20. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 21. Vista Paint.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior stains and finishes applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 2. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 3. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.

D. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 WOOD FILLERS

A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.

2.4 PRIMERS AND SEALERS

A. Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear: MPI #102.

2.5 STAINS

A. Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90.


















2.6 SOLVENT-BASED VARNISHES

A. Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #30.

2.7 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES

A. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #57.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing materials.

Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.



B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items

that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with

clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.

2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer.

D. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler.

Sand smooth when dried. 5. Seal bottoms and tops of wood doors with one coat of topcoat material specified.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces.



3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including wood trim and doors. 1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:

a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. c. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss Level 4), MPI #57.
